Chevrolet EXPRESS PASSENGER 2007, 2007 Express Passenger Owner's manual

Chevrolet EXPRESS PASSENGER 2007, 2007 Express Passenger Owner's manual
2007 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 13
Safety Belts ............................................ 17
Child Restraints ...................................... 41
Airbag System ........................................ 78
Restraint System Check
......................... 98
Features and Controls ..............................
Keys .....................................................
Doors and Locks ..................................
Windows ...............................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems
.......................
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle .....
Mirrors ..................................................
Storage Areas
......................................
101
102
108
116
119
120
134
139
M
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Audio System(s) ...................................
141
144
160
166
187
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 227
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 228
Towing
................................................. 264
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
All-Wheel Drive .....................................
283
286
288
296
332
1
Rear Axle .............................................
Front Axle
............................................
Noise Control System ...........................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
2
333
334
334
336
340
342
378
388
389
394
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 397
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 398
Customer Assistance Information ............. 417
Customer Assistance and Information ... 418
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 436
Index .......................................................... 439
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name CHEVY EXPRESS are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15861874 A First Printing
©
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference
the following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Power Seat ................................................. 10
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10
Rear Seats .................................................... 13
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 13
Safety Belts .................................................. 17
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 17
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 21
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 22
Driver Position ............................................. 22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32
Center Passenger Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row) ............................ 33
Center Passenger Position (2nd Row) ......... 34
Rear Outside Passenger Positions .............. 34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 37
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 40
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 40
Child Restraints ............................................ 41
Older Children ............................................. 41
Infants and Young Children ......................... 44
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 51
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 54
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position or the
Second Row Center Seat Position ........... 63
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position (3rd, 4th,
and 5th Row) ........................................... 66
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System) .................... 68
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Airbag Off Switch) .................................... 72
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 78
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 80
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 82
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 84
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 84
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 84
Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 86
8
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 89
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 96
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 97
Restraint System Check ............................... 98
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 98
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 99
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with
your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
9
Power Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has front power seat(s), you can
adjust them with these controls located at the front
center of the seat cushion.
To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up
or down. To move the seat forward or rearward,
move the center knob toward the right or left.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion,
move the right lever up or down. To raise or lower
the rear of the seat cushion, move the left lever
up or down.
10
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.
The lever used to operate them is located on
the inboard side of the seats.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure
to the seatback and the seatback will return
to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
11
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
12
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
2. Locate the pins. There are two pins located
on the inboard sides of the rear seats. If the
vehicle has floor mats, the pins will be located
under a flap that has been cut into the mat.
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the quick release latch plates for
the lap-shoulder belts on the bench seat to
be removed.
1. To do this, press the
tip of a key into the
release hole of the
safety belt buckle
while pulling up on
the safety belt.
• The driver’s side pin has a gray cap with a
black “L” marked on it.
13
7. For the first row
rear seat, stow the
safety belt latch by
attaching the clip on
the safety belt latch
to the trim just inside
the side door.
• The passenger’s side pin has a black cap
with a white “R” marked on it.
3. Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin
from the retaining clip, then pull the pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the pin on the other
seat base.
5. Pull the seat rearward about 2 inches (5 cm)
and then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
14
For the remaining rear seats, stow the safety
belt latch plate on the clip at the window trim.
Replacing the Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision
or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat
into place properly when installing it.
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both
rails. Push the seat forward in the rail,
hooking both seat bases onto the pins inside
of the rails.
2. To install the locking pins at the rear of the
seat base, locate the hole in the rail for the
pin. It is found on the inboard side of the seat.
If the vehicle has floor mats, pull the flap
that has been cut into the mat.
15
3. Insert the locking pin into the seat base and
push the seat to line up with the pin with the
base. The pin with the black cap marked “R”
must be installed on the passenger’s side and
the pin with the gray cap marked “L” on the
driver’s side.
4. Push the pin with the black cap marked “R”
down until it is in the retaining clip.
16
5. Push the pin with the gray cap marked “L”
down until it is in the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap
back to its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the quick-release latch plates for
the lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch
plates into the buckles attached at the
outboard positions of the bench seat.
Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that all locking pins are locked into
place before operating the vehicle.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 168 and Passenger
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 169.
17
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be
a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
18
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
19
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
20
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down.
And your chance of being conscious during
and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should
I have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
21
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 41 or Infants and Young
Children on page 44. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
22
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 40.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 31.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
23
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
24
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden
stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
26
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
30
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion
of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt
height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is
out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you
can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down,
pull on the center
adjuster control
labeled PULL.
You can move the
height adjuster up
just by pushing
up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing in
to make sure it has locked into position.
31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect
the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,
it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 22.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for the following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
32
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop.
Center Passenger Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row)
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has third, fourth or fifth row bench
seats, someone can sit in the center positions.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as
shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as
the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt
isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 40.
When you sit in a center seating position in the
third, fourth or fifth row, you have a lap safety belt,
which has no retractor. To make the belt longer,
tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
33
Center Passenger Position
(2nd Row)
If your vehicle has a second row bench seat,
someone can sit in the center position. When you
sit in the center position in the second row
bench seat, you have a lap-shoulder belt which
works the same way as the rear seat outside
passengers’ belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have
lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt see,
“Lap-Shoulder Belt” under Rear Outside
Passenger Positions on page 34.
Rear Outside Passenger Positions
It is very important for rear seat passengers
to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle who
are wearing safety belts.
34
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted. The shoulder
belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let the belt go back
all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 40.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
35
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
36
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger
position in the rear seats. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop
on the side wall.
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of
the seatback.
37
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.
The elastic cord must be under the belt.
Then, place the guide over the belt and
insert the two edges of the belt into the
slots of the guide.
38
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed
in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Outside Passenger
Positions on page 34. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into
its storage pocket on the side of the seatback.
39
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle may safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate
in a crash, you will need to get new ones,
and probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 99.
40
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
seating position that has a lap-shoulder belt to
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide.
41
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is seated in a rear outside seat
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
42
position, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 37. If the child is
sitting in the second row center seat position,
move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide. If the child
is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap
belt, if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
43
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
44
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
CAUTION:
(Continued)
45
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.
46
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt
may not remain low on the hip bones, as
it should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
47
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
48
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is
a portable one, which is purchased by
the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,
an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on
child restraints, the child has to be secured
within the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint,
be sure the child restraint is designed to
be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
49
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make
sure the child restraint is properly installed
in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety
belt or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
50
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 54 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Make sure the
child is properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child
riding in a booster seat. Never put a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat unless your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system or an airbag off switch
and the passenger airbag status indicator or
the airbag off light shows off.
51
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there
is a label on your sun visor that says, “Never
put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This
is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system or the airbag off switch is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION:
52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator or the airbag
off light shows off. Here is why:
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system or the airbag off switch is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
or the airbag off switch and you need to secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat, the passenger’s frontal airbag
must be off. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 89, Airbag Off Switch on page 86, and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position (With Passenger Sensing System)
on page 68 or Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch)
on page 72 for more on this, including important
safety information.
53
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the child restraint that
are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether strap and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
54
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate
a child restraint with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
55
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Second Row
See the information following for installing a child
restraint with a top tether in the second row
center position.
56
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Do not install three child restraints in the rear seat
and never install two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Front Passenger
Position
Third and Fourth Row
with Three Passenger
Bench Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has
two labels, near
the crease between
the seatback and
the seat cushion.
57
There are two top tether anchors in the second
row. To install a child restraint in the left outboard
seating position, use anchor point (A). To install
a child restraint in the right outboard seating
position, use anchor point (B). To install a child
restraint in the center seating position, use either
anchor point (A) or (B). Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether anchor.
There is a top tether anchor for the center seating
positions in the third and fourth rows, if equipped,
with a three-passenger bench seat. The anchor
is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion.
Third or Fourth Row — Three Passenger
Bench Seat
Second Row — Passenger Van
58
There is a top tether anchor for the front
passenger position with a front passenger seat.
The anchor is located at the rear of the seat
cushion on the right front passenger’s seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in the outside
seating positions of the third and fourth rows if the
vehicle has a three-passenger bench seat, or in
any four-passenger rear bench seat, if a national
or local law requires that the top tether be
attached, or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached. There is no place to attach the top tether
in these positions.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 51
for additional information.
Front Passenger Position
There are no top tether anchors or lower anchors
in a four passenger fourth or fifth row seat.
59
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
60
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only
one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to
the lower anchors.
61
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. For the second row only, in the left
outboard seating position, use anchor
point (A). For the right outboard
seating position, use anchor point (B).
For the center seating position, use
either anchor point (A) or (B). Never
install two top tethers using the
same top tether anchor.
2.3. Route and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you
are using does not
have a head restraint
and you are using
a single tether, route
the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you
are using does not
have a head restraint
and you are using
a dual tether, route
the tether over
the seatback.
62
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether
around the headrest.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest and you
are using a single
tether, route the tether
over the headrest.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position or the
Second Row Center Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
For vehicles with a third, fourth, or fifth row, there
are no top tether anchors in the rear outside seat
positions of the third, fourth, or fifth row. Do not
secure a child seat in these positions if a national or
local law requires that the top tether be anchored,
or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt
to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
63
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
64
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
5. To tighten the belt, pull the shoulder portion of
the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger. When the safety belt is not
in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop
on the side wall.
65
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
(3rd, 4th, and 5th Row)
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
There are no top strap anchors in any
four-passenger bench seat positions, if your
vehicle has this type of seat. Do not secure a child
seat in these positions if a national or local law
requires that the top strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
66
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting
the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with your child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you
push down on the child restraint. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will
be ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
67
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 51.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 89 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 172 for more information on this, including
important safety information.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there is
a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put
a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.
68
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 9 or Power Seat on page 10.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
69
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 89. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 9 or Power Seat on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the
off indicator in the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when you turn
the ignition to RUN or START. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 172.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
70
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
71
7. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
9. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch)
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
There is a switch on the instrument panel that you
can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 86
for more on this, including important safety
information.
72
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is
designed to turn off the passenger’s
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles
with a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the passenger seat,
always move the passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
United States
Canada
(Continued)
73
Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat unless the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right
front seat, always move the right front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward
facing child restraint. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 51. If you need to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position, move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. See
Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seat on page 10.
74
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it
means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly. Until you have the vehicle
serviced, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat). See Airbag Off Switch on page 86.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 86. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the restraint in
this seat. See Manual Seats on page 9 or
Power Seat on page 10. If you need to use a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the airbag is off once the child restraint
has been installed.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the airbag off light should light and
stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or
START. See Airbag Off Light on page 170.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
75
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
76
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder belt to tighten the
lap belt portion and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. If you are using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You
should not be able to pull more of the belt
out of the retractor once the lock has been set.
7. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 54.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a
risk group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 86
for more on this, including important
safety information.
If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to
turn on the right front passenger’s airbag when
you remove the child restraint from the vehicle
unless the person who will be sitting there
is a member of a passenger airbag risk group.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 86.
77
Airbag System
Your vehicle has an airbag for the driver in the
middle of the steering wheel. If it says AIR BAG on
the instrument panel in front of the right front
passenger’s seat, your vehicle has an airbag for
the right front passenger.
If there is not a right front passenger’s seat, your
vehicle has an airbag for the driver only.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Airbags are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
CAUTION:
78
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
And, for some unrestrained occupants,
airbags may provide less protection in
frontal crashes than more forceful airbags
have provided in the past. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster
than the blink of an eye. If you are too
close to an inflating airbag, as you would
be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an airbag for the right front
passenger, read the following:
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 41 and Infants and Young Children
on page 44.
79
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 169 for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
80
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s
airbag is in the instrument panel on the
passenger’s side.
81
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But
they are designed to inflate only if the impact
exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.
Deployment thresholds take into account a variety
of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate
and help restrain the occupants. Whether
your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
82
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. Inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in front or
near-frontal impacts.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of
your vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, your
vehicle has single stage airbags. If the GVWR
is below 8,500 lb (3 855 kg), your vehicle has dual
stage airbags. You can find the GVWR on the
certification label on the rear edge of the driver’s
door. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259
for more information.
Single Stage Airbags
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with single stage
deployment and your vehicle goes straight into
a wall that does not move or deform, the threshold
level is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
Dual Stage Airbags
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with dual stage
deployment, the restraint will adjust according
to the crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors which helps the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of
your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does
not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for
a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph
(29 to 40 km/h). The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it
can be somewhat above or below this range.
Vehicles with dual stage airbags also have sensors
which enable the sensing system to monitor the
position of both the driver and passenger front
seats. The seat position sensors provide
information which is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or
at full deployment.
83
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a
crash. The sensing system triggers a release of
gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag modules inside the steering
wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
The airbag supplements the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,
and many side impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions.
84
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag or the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s bag — may be hot for a short
time. The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn
the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front passenger
airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After they inflate, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another crash. A new
system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data Recorders on page 431.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
85
Airbag Off Switch
If your vehicle has one of the switches pictured in
the following illustrations, your vehicle has an
airbag off switch that you can use to turn off the
right front passenger’s airbag.
This switch should only be turned to airbag OFF if
the person in the right front passenger’s position
is a member of a passenger risk group identified
by the national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• The infant has a medical condition which,
according to the infant’s physician, makes
it necessary for the infant to ride in the front
seat so that the driver can constantly
monitor the child’s condition.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle does not have an airbag off switch,
it may have a passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 89.
86
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to
12 sometimes must ride in the front because
no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my
vehicle; or
• The child has a medical condition which,
according to the child’s physician, makes
it necessary for the child to ride in the front
seat so that the driver can constantly monitor
the child’s condition.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in
a risk group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 86.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a
special risk for the passenger; and
• Makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing
the passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
87
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the off position.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know
that the right front passenger’s airbag is off.
The light will stay on to remind you that the airbag
is off. The right front passenger’s airbag will
remain off until you turn it back on.
88
If the airbag readiness light ever comes
on when you have turned off the airbag,
it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in your vehicle) until you
have your vehicle serviced. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 169 for
additional information.
Passenger Sensing System
If your instrument panel has one of the indicators
pictured in the following illustrations, your
vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle does not have a passenger sensing
system, it may have an airbag off switch. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 86.
89
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to RUN or START. The words ON
and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible on the instrument panel during the
system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF,
or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 172.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbag is not part of the
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
90
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
91
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
CAUTION:
92
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight
off of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System) in the Index.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position if one
is available and check with your dealer.
93
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit,
it could be because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens, turn
the vehicle off and ask the person to place the
seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
94
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain
in this position for about two minutes. This
will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 169
for more on this, including important
safety information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from
the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing
the child restraint or small occupant. You may
want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 97 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
95
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 437.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
96
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
of the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.
If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 418.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
the instrument panel, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 418.
97
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 381
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
98
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
the airbag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel or both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are
working properly after a crash, have
them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new safety
belts or LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, if your vehicle has these, you
will need to replace airbag system parts. See the
part on the airbag system earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
safety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do
so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to
help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. On some models, the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain safety belt pretensioners. If your vehicle
has safety belt pretensioners, have them checked
if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your
airbag readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 169.
99
✍ NOTES
100
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 102
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 103
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation .................................. 104
Doors and Locks ........................................ 108
Door Locks ................................................ 108
Power Door Locks ..................................... 109
Cargo Door Relocking ............................... 109
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 110
Lockout Protection ..................................... 110
Sliding Side Door ...................................... 111
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ....................... 112
Rear Doors ............................................... 114
Windows ...................................................... 116
Manual Windows ....................................... 116
Power Windows ........................................ 117
Swing-Out Windows .................................. 118
Sun Visors ................................................ 118
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 119
Passlock® .................................................. 119
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 120
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 120
Ignition Positions ....................................... 121
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 122
Starting the Engine .................................... 122
Fuel Regulator ........................................... 124
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 124
Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 125
Parking Brake ........................................... 128
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 129
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 130
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 131
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 132
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 133
Mirrors ......................................................... 134
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 134
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ........ 134
Outside Manual Mirror ............................... 136
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .................... 136
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 138
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 138
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 139
Storage Areas ............................................. 139
101
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
102
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door
locks. It will fit with
either side up.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If the vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys
and a bar-coded tag.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make
extra keys. Keep this tag in a safe place. If you
lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new
ones made easily using this tag.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 424.
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
103
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 104.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Q (Lock): Press this
button once to lock all of
the doors. The parking
lamps will flash and
the interior lamps
will turn on briefly. Press
the lock button again
within five seconds and
the parking lamps
will flash and the horn
will chirp briefly.
W (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash twice and
the interior lamps will turn on. Press the unlock
button again within five seconds to unlock the
remaining doors. The parking lamps will flash.
104
L (Panic Alarm): The remote keyless entry
transmitter comes equipped with an instant panic
alarm. To use the alarm, press the horn symbol
while the ignition is turned off. The horn will sound
and both the interior and exterior lamps will
flash for up to thirty seconds. To stop the instant
panic alarm, press the panic button again,
wait for thirty seconds, or start the vehicle.
j (Cargo Door): Press this button to unlock the
cargo doors only.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded
to prevent another transmitter from unlocking
your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your dealer.
Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with
you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer
matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once your dealer has coded the new
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
105
Resynchronization
Battery Replacement
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The
transmitter does not send the same signal twice to
the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a
signal that has been sent previously. This prevents
anyone from recording and playing back the
signal from the transmitter.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
four years.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to
your vehicle and press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons on the transmitter at the same time
for seven seconds. The door locks should cycle
to confirm synchronization. If the locks do not
cycle, see your dealer for service.
106
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to get close to your vehicle before the
transmitter works, it’s probably time to change
the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
3. Remove and replace the battery, positive (+)
side down.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to
be sure no moisture can enter.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the remote keyless entry transmitter for
seven seconds to resynchronize the
transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
1. Use an object like a coin to pry open the
transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use an
object like a pencil to remove the old
battery. Do not use a metal object.
107
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
108
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on
page 103 for more information.
From the outside, use your key.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the manual
lever on your door down.
To unlock the door, slide
the manual lever up.
Power Door Locks
Press the bottom side of
the power door lock
switch to lock all
the doors at once. Press
the top side of the
power door lock switch
to unlock all the
doors at once.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.
Cargo Door Relocking
This feature protects against having an unsecured
side cargo door. If the side cargo door is open
when the lock button is pressed on the door or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, all doors will
lock and then relock again after the cargo door is
closed. If the cargo door is not closed within
several minutes, the relock will not occur.
109
Rear Door Security Locks
For the side sliding
door, move the button
up to engage the
security feature. Move
the button down to
return the door locks to
normal operation.
Security locks are located on the front portion of
the 60/40 side swing-out door, or the side
sliding door.
For the 60/40 side
swing-out door, move
the button to the right for
the driver’s side door
or to the left for
the passenger’s side
door to engage
the security feature.
Side Sliding Door
Lockout Protection
60/40 Swing-Out Side
Door; Driver’s Side
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Similar
Move the button to the left for the driver’s side
door or to the right for the passenger’s side door
to return the door locks to normal operation.
110
This feature protects you from locking your key in
the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and
a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when either the
driver’s, passenger’s, or rear door is open, all
the doors will lock and then the driver’s door will
unlock. This feature does not include the side
cargo door.
Sliding Side Door
To open the sliding side door from the outside,
pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and
slide the door open.
To close the sliding side door from the outside,
use the handle to slide the door toward the front of
the vehicle.
When the door is closed, it will be flush with the
side of the body.
To open the sliding side door from the inside, turn
the handle upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle. Then, slide the door toward the rear of the
vehicle.
To close the sliding side door from the inside,
grasp the handle and slide the door toward
the front of the vehicle.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.
111
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull out on the handle and pull the
door toward you.
112
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
inside, pull the handle toward you and push
open the door.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door
first. Then close the front door. Check to make
sure that both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the
door partially, pull the check strap toward you and
then open the door. When you close the door,
the check strap will automatically re-engage.
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear
door and pull the door toward you.
113
Rear Doors
CAUTION:
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
114
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the
handle toward you to open the passenger side
rear door first.
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch
release at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear
door first. Then, close the passenger side rear
door. Check to make sure both doors are
completely closed.
115
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand
crank on each door to raise or lower your side door
windows.
116
Power Windows
Press the bottom of the switch with the power
window symbol on it to lower the window.
If you have power
windows, the controls
are located on each
of the side doors.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window also. Your power windows will work
when the ignition has been turned to RUN or
ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 122.
Press the top of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
Express-Down
The driver’s window switch also has an
express-down feature that allows the window to be
lowered without holding the switch. Press and hold
the side of the window switch marked AUTO for
one second to activate the express-down mode.
This mode can be cancelled at any time by pressing
the opposite side of the switch. To open the window
part way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at
the desired position.
117
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Windows
Side Swing-Out Window
To open the side door swing-out window, pull up
on the latch at the edge of the window. Swing
the window out and push down on the latch to lock
the window into place.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you
and push down on the latch to lock it.
118
Your vehicle also has rear swing-out windows.
The rear swing-out windows work the same way as
the side swing out window, but the latch is
located at the bottom edge of the window.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors.
You can also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
You may have visor vanity mirrors, with or without
lamps. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps
on, if you have them.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will
go off approximately five seconds after the key
is turned to RUN. See Security Light on page 183.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to
restart the engine. Remember to release the key
from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if
you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®
system is not working properly and must be
serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not
protected by Passlock® at this time. You may also
want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 389. See your dealer for service.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder
is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not
used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with,
fuel is disabled.
119
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
120
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 266 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you cannot turn it, be sure you are using
the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn
the key only with your hand. Using a tool to
force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your
vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four
different positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove the key when the ignition
is turned to LOCK.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in
the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting.
Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory
ignition position for a long period of time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
121
Key In the Ignition
Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will
allow certain features on your vehicle to continue
to work for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned to LOCK or until one of the doors is
opened.
122
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or LOCK
position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
123
Fuel Regulator
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
Your vehicle has a fuel regulator that shuts the
fuel off when the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
{CAUTION:
Engine Coolant Heater
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should
be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F
(0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat
in the plug end of the cord. This will prevent
operation of the engine coolant heater when the
temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is
located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment and is attached to the hose for
the power steering reservoir.
124
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 129. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 266.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) with the ignition
in RUN.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 130.
125
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 258.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
126
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your
brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 243.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transmission will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However it reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)
when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a
lower gear) when towing a trailer to minimize
heat build-up and extend the life of your
transmission.
You may use this feature for reducing torque to
the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. The repair will not be covered by
your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin
the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
127
Parking Brake
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down. Pull the handle, located
just above the parking brake pedal, marked
BRAKE RELEASE to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is
released, the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down
the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
128
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 266. That
section shows what to do first to keep the trailer
from moving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 266.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling
the shift lever toward you and moving it up as
far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
129
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque
lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park (P) on page 129.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 125.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
130
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then, move the shift lever into
the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of
Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive
gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
131
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
• Your vehicle was damaged when
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust and fuel operated heater
exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon
monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death. If your vehicle has a diesel engine
and a fuel operated heater, see “Fuel
Operated Heater (FOH)” in the diesel
engine supplement.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
132
(Continued)
(Continued)
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 132.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 254.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 129.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 266.
133
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce
glare from headlamps behind you after dark.
Push the tab away from you to restore the mirror
to the original position.
If you have a cargo van without the rear door
glass, your vehicle may not have an inside
rearview mirror.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you
after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the
upper right corner of the mirror with the compass
reading and the outside temperature.
Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the display
on or off.
134
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
compass/temperature button. Pressing the
compass/temperature button once briefly, will
toggle the display reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the compass/temperature
button for approximately three seconds until the
display blinks F and C. After approximately
five seconds of inactivity, the display will stop
blinking and display the last selection made.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, see your
dealer.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
O: Press this button to turn the automatic
dimming feature on or off. The indicator light to
the left of the button will turn on to indicate when
the feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,
it will remain off until it is turned back on, or until
the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Operation
Press the compass/temperature button once
briefly to turn the display on or off.
Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading, N for
North, for example, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad
holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle
is outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push in the compass/temperature button for
approximately nine seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
135
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little
of the side of your vehicle, and have a clear
view of objects behind you. Some mirrors can be
folded in to enter narrow passageways.
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
2. Press and hold the compass/temperature
button for six seconds until a zone number
appears in the display.
3. Press the compass/temperature button on the
bottom of the mirror until the new zone
number appears in the display. After you stop
pressing the button, the display will show a
compass direction within a few seconds.
136
If your vehicle is
equipped with this style
camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so
you can have a clear
view of any objects
behind you.
1. To adjust the mirrors
when towing a
trailer, turn
the mirror by
pushing the mirror
head toward
the front of the
vehicle.
2. Turn the mirror head
so that it swings
further outboard and
adjust the mirror
surface as needed.
If your vehicle is
equipped with this style
camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so
you can have a clear
view of the objects
behind you.
Adjust the mirror by rotating it left or right. Once
the mirror is adjusted to the correct position,
tighten the set screw, located at the end of the
arm, to hold the mirror in place. These mirrors can
also be manually folded in.
On the lower portion of each mirror is a convex
mirror. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you
can see more from the driver’s seat.
137
Outside Power Mirrors
If the vehicle has power
mirrors, the control is
located on the driver’s
side door.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise
for the passenger’s side mirror or counterclockwise
for the driver’s side mirror. The center position
is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob
in the desired direction.
138
A convex mirror can make things
(like other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with outside
heated mirrors, they can
be defrosted by
pressing the mirror
button located near the
fan control.
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have a front storage
compartment. It is located at the center of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open
the compartment, pull up on the latch. The
compartment will open automatically.
Storage compartments may also be included on
the inside of each front door.
An indicator light in the button will light when the
outside heated mirrors are activated.
Your rear window defogger comes on when the
outside heated mirrors are on. If your vehicle has a
rear window defogger, see “Rear Window
Defogger” in Climate Control System on page 160.
139
✍ NOTES
140
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 144
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 146
Other Warning Devices ............................. 146
Horn .......................................................... 146
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 147
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 147
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 148
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 149
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 149
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 150
Windshield Washer .................................... 151
Cruise Control ........................................... 151
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 155
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 156
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 156
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 157
Dome Lamps ............................................. 157
Dome Lamp Override ................................ 157
Entry Lighting ............................................ 158
Exit Lighting .............................................. 158
Reading Lamps ......................................... 158
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 158
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 158
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 159
Climate Controls ......................................... 160
Climate Control System ............................. 160
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 162
Rear Heating System ................................ 163
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System ...................................... 164
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 166
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 167
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 168
Trip Odometer ........................................... 168
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 168
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 169
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 169
Airbag Off Light ......................................... 170
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 172
Charging System Light .............................. 174
Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 175
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 175
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 176
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ...................... 177
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 177
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 178
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 178
Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 182
141
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 183
Security Light ............................................ 183
Cruise Control Light .................................. 184
Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 184
Highbeam On Light ................................... 184
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light ........................................ 185
Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 185
Check Gages Warning Light ...................... 185
Fuel Gage ................................................. 186
Audio System(s) ......................................... 187
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 189
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................... 189
142
AM-FM Radio ............................................ 190
Radio with CD ........................................... 193
Radio with Cassette and CD ..................... 198
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 211
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios) ................................. 223
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) ....... 223
Radio Reception ........................................ 224
Care of the Cassette Tape Player ............. 224
Care of Your CDs ..................................... 225
Care of the CD Player .............................. 226
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 226
Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 226
✍ NOTES
143
Instrument Panel Overview
144
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 162.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 147.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 167.
D. Shift Lever. See Starting the Engine on
page 122.
E. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 160.
F. Audio System(s). See Audio System(s) on
page 187.
G. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps
on page 155.
H. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
under Towing a Trailer on page 266.
I. Rear Heating System (If Equipped). See Rear
Heating System on page 163.
J. Accessory Power Outlets/Cigarette Lighter. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 158 and
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 159.
K. Airbag Off Switch. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 86.
L. Storage Compartment. See Storage Areas
on page 139.
M. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped), Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator, and High-Idle System
(If Equipped). See StabiliTrak® System on
page 235 or Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 172.
145
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
Horn
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the
key is not in the ignition.
146
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the
steering wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can also
raise it to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 148.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and
pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 149.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
on page 149.
147
•
N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield
Wipers on page 150.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 151.
• I Cruise Control. Cruise Control on
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
page 151.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 155 later in this section.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
148
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the
lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it
there until you complete your lane change. The
lever will return by itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down,
and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate,
a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers
may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when
you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs or
a blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 389.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If your turn signal is left on for more than
3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each
flash of the turn signal. To turn off the chime,
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you
that you want to pass. It works even if your
headlamps are off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,
but not so far that you hear it click.
23 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on
the instrument panel
cluster also will be on.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on and stay on as
long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel will
come on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam
headlamps off.
149
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the
band with the wiper symbol on it.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the
band to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start,
then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.
If you want more wipes, hold the band on
mist longer.
Delay: You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very
useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band
to choose the delay time. The closer to the top
of the lever, the shorter the delay.
150
d (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low
speed, turn the band away from you to the first
solid band past the delay settings. position.
For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to
the second solid band past the delay settings.
To stop the wipers, move the band to off position.
a (High Speed): For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to the second solid band
past the delay settings.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to
the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.
If your blades do become worn or damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain
a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will
clear the window and then either stop or return to
your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
disengage.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
151
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
9 (Off): This position turns the system off.
R (On): This position activates the system.
S (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this
symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume
to a previously set speed.
T (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel
will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
152
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a
desired speed and then you apply the brake.
This, of course, disengages the cruise control.
But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch from
on to resume/accelerate briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate briefly,
the vehicle will keep going faster until you
release the switch or apply the brake. So unless
you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at
resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of
the lever, then release the button and
the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at
the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch to resume/accelerate briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
153
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the set button at the end of
the lever until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the set button briefly. Each time you do
this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may
want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain
your speed. When going downhill, you may
have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find
this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control switch to off.
• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature,
cruise control will deactivate if road conditions
cause StabiliTrak® to activate.
154
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
The control on the
driver’s side of your
instrument panel
operates the exterior
lamps.
i (Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)): Turning
the control to this position selects the DRL.
When the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the
DRL will turn on, unless defeated. When the
DRL are active, the DRL indicator will illuminate.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps, together with
the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
•
•
•
•
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (Canada)
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
If the DRL are active when the control is turned
to this position, the DRL will turn off.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRL will
remain active along with the lamps mentioned
above.
Ø (Defeat): Turn the control to this position to
turn off the DRL. Vehicles first sold in Canada
cannot turn off the DRL.
155
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps together with the
parking lamps and turn off the daytime running
lamps.
You can switch your headlamps from high to
low-beam by pulling the turn signal/high-beam
lever toward you.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you
have an electrical overload, your headlamps
will flicker on and off. Have your headlamp wiring
checked right away if this happens.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your control
is turned to the headlamps or parking lamps
position, your key is out of the ignition, and your
driver’s door is open. To disable the chime,
turn the control to the Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) position and then back to the parking
lamps or headlamps position.
156
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in DRL mode
and not in the defeat position.
When the DRL are on, only the parking lamps
will be on. The other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel will be lit.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the
headlamps will go off, and your DRL lamps
(parking lamps) will illuminate.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control
to the off position or shift into PARK (P). The
DRL will stay off until the control is toggled again
or the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in
the United States.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Press this knob located
next to the exterior
lamps knob to extend it,
and then turn it to
adjust the instrument
panel brightness.
Turn the knob all the way clockwise to turn on
the interior lamps. Press the knob back into
its stored position when not in use.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will automatically come on when
a door is opened and turn off shortly after all
doors are closed.
Dome Lamp Override
You can use the dome
lamp override button,
located below the
exterior lamp control, to
override the automatic
operation of the
dome lamps.
To turn the automatic operation of the lamps off,
press the button. The dome lamps will remain
off while a door is open. To return the lamps to
automatic operation, press the button again.
While pressed in, this will override the illuminated
entry feature unless you use your keyless entry
transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
157
Entry Lighting
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
This feature shuts off the exterior and interior lamps
if they are left on after the ignition is turned off.
All exterior lamps will shut off after 10 minutes.
Interior cargo lamps will shut down after 20 minutes
and all other interior lamps after 10 minutes.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will
come on if the dome override button is in the out
position. If the dome override button is pressed
in, the lamps will not come on. When the door is
closed, the interior lamps will remain on for a
period of 15 seconds or until the vehicle is started.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
for a period of 40 seconds when you remove
the key from the ignition. The lamps will not come
on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Reading Lamps
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press
the button again.
158
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With accessory power outlets you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power
outlets. If your vehicle has a cigarette
lighter/accessory power outlet, it is located on the
driver’s side of the front storage compartment.
The other accessory power outlet is located on the
passenger’s side of the front storage compartment.
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using
it, always close the cover.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be
compatible to the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power plugs.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle.
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet
can cause damage not covered by your
warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The front
ashtray can be placed in the instrument panel
extension at the center of the instrument panel.
Lift up on the ashtray door to open it.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way
and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back
out by itself.
159
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air
to the floor outlets with some air directed to the
outboard outlets (for the side windows) and some
air directed to the windshield.
The right knob can also be used to select the
defrost and defog modes. Information on defogging
and defrosting can be found later in this section.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
160
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
fan speed.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air
conditioning controls will look like this:
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before defrosting.
Turn the knob on the right of the climate control
panel to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog): With this setting, the outside air
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
comes out of both the floor and defroster outlets.
Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or
cooler air. The air conditioning compressor may
operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.
A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting will begin to
cool and dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle.
1 (Defrost): This setting operates the defroster.
Most of the air comes out near the windshield,
with some going to the floor outlets and front side
windows. The air conditioning compressor may
operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the
right knob to MAX A/C for maximum cooling.
This setting cools the air the fastest, by
recirculating the inside air.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or
frost from your windshield and side windows.
The defog setting is useful for cold weather with
a large number of passengers or very humid
conditions to help keep the windshield clear. Use
defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield
quickly in extremely cold conditions. The
temperature knob should be in the red area and
the fan control toward high. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
161
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
Some vehicles may have a rear window defogger.
Use the outlets located near the center and on
the sides of the instrument panel to change
the direction of airflow.
< R. DEF (Rear Defrost): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the window as possible.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window and
will only work when the ignition is RUN.
The rear window defogger will turn off several
minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will run for several more
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or
by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
162
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Rear Heating System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating system that
allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing
into the rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating
area. This feature works with the main
climate-control system in your vehicle.
9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up or down to
increase or decrease the amount of heated air sent
to the rear-seating area.
HI: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to supply
the most amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
LO: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to supply
the least amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
OFF: Turn the thumbwheel to this position to turn
the rear heating system off.
REAR HEAT: The thumbwheel for this system is
located to the left of the audio system.
163
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating and
air-conditioning system. This system regulates the
temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery for
the rear-seat passengers only. It also works with
the main climate-control system in your vehicle.
Rear Climate Control Panel
If your vehicle has a 135 inch (343 cm) wheelbase,
a rear control panel for this system is located in
the second row behind the driver in the rear
of your vehicle. A rear seat passenger can use
this control panel to personally adjust the
temperature, the direction of the airflow and the
fan speed for the rear seating area.
Front Climate Control Panel
Use this control panel when you would like to
maintain a separate temperature setting. Adjust the
direction of the airflow or adjust the fan speed
for the rear seat passenger(s).
164
The fan knob located on the front climate control
panel must be turned to REAR CNTL to allow a rear
seat passenger to use the control panel in the rear
seating area. Performing this action disables the
front control panel. To return control to this panel,
move the fan knob out of REAR CNTL.
Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to change the direction of the airflow in the rear
seating area.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): Use this mode to direct air to the
upper outlets, with a little air directed to the floor
outlets.
2 (Floor): Use this mode to direct most of the
air to the floor outlets.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to HIGH, MED (Medium) or
LOW to increase or decrease the fan speed in the
rear-seating area. Turn the knob to OFF to turn
off the fan.
The air-conditioning system on the main climate
control panel must be turned on to direct cooled air
to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the
temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at
cabin temperature.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats
clear of any objects so that the air inside of your
vehicle can circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate
control system, see Climate Control System
on page 160. For information on ventilation, see
Outlet Adjustment on page 162.
Temperature Control: To increase or decrease
the temperature for the rear of the vehicle, turn the
right knob located on the climate-control panel.
165
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
attention to your warning lights and gages could
also save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
166
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there’s a problem with your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and
gages. They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running.
You will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will
need to know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
167
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. If the new
one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s
set at zero and a label must be put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your
vehicle has been driven since you last set the
trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument
panel cluster next to the trip odometer display,
to toggle between the trip odometer and the
regular odometer. Holding the reset button for
approximately one second while the trip odometer
is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition
off, press the reset button.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will be provided for several seconds to remind
people to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also be provided and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
You should buckle your seat belt.
This light and chime
reminder will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in
motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will be provided.
168
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
If your vehicle has this feature, several seconds
after the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would
only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 89 for more
information. The passenger safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This light and chime
reminder will be
repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 78.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
169
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly.
The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
170
Airbag Off Light
If your vehicle is equipped with an airbag off
switch, when you turn the right front passenger’s
airbag off, the airbag off light will come on and
stay on to remind you that the airbag has
been turned off. This light will go off when you turn
the airbag back on again. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 86 for more on this, including important
safety information.
United States
Canada
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in
a risk group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes
on when you have turned off the airbag,
it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in your vehicle) until you
have your vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 86.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in
a risk group identified by the national
government. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 86 for more on this, including
important safety information.
171
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
the instrument panel will have a passenger
airbag status indicator.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
172
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off and
the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
173
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 89 for more on this,
including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together,
it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 169.
174
Charging System Light
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
on the ignition, before
starting the engine, as a
check to show you it
is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it
stays on or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with your charging system.
It could indicate a problem with the generator drive
belt, or some other charging system problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this light
is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is on (in the RUN
position), this gage
shows your battery’s
state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows
the condition of the charging system. Readings
between the low and high warning zones indicate
the normal operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur
when a large number of electrical accessories are
operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at
an idle for an extended period. This condition
is normal since the charging system is not able
to provide full power at engine idle. As engine
speeds are increased, this condition should correct
itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging
system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the
reading in either warning zone. If you must drive,
turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a
possible problem in the electrical system.
Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good braking,
though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
175
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 264.
176
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident. If
the light is still on after you have pulled off
the road and stopped carefully, have the
vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may
stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, you
don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 175 for more information.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to
RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light
If your vehicle has the
StabiliTrak® system,
this light will come
on according to
the description table
for the StabiliTrak®
system.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 235.
You will hear three chimes if the light turns on and
one chime if the light turns off.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
If you have the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light will be on or
flashing, according to
the description table for
the StabiliTrak® system.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 235.
You will hear three chimes if the light turns on and
one chime if the light turns off.
If this light remains on steady, your vehicle needs
to be taken in for service.
177
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area
your engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal operating conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle, and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 311.
178
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The Check Engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 286.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
179
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
180
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 293.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 289. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.) This will be detected by the
system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Check Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if you have recently replaced your
battery or if your battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This may take several days of routine driving. If you
have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,
your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
181
Oil Pressure Gage
A reading in the low pressure zone may be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or other
problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil
as soon as possible.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when
the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the low pressure zone indicate the normal
operating range.
182
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become
so hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Change Engine Oil Light
Security Light
This light is displayed
when your vehicle
needs to be serviced.
United States
If your vehicle has a V8 engine and this light is
flashing, it indicates that the oil level is low.
When this light is on steady, your vehicle needs
to be serviced. See Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 400 for more
information.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the
change engine oil light must be reset. Until it is
reset, the light will stay on for a while each time
the engine is started. For more information
on resetting the system, see “How to Reset the
Engine Oil Life System” under Engine Oil Life
System (Gasoline Engine) on page 302.
Canada
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the
light flashes, the Passlock® System has entered
a tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start,
see Passlock® on page 119.
If the light comes on continuously while driving
and stays on, there may be a problem with
the Passlock® System. Your vehicle will not be
protected by Passlock®, and you should see your
GM dealer.
183
Cruise Control Light
United States
If the reduced engine power light is on, but there
is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle
may be driven at a reduced speed while the
reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Canada
The cruise light comes on whenever you set your
cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 151
for more information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
United States
Canada
If the check engine and reduced engine power lights
are on, the throttle may be disabled and a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur.
184
Anytime the check engine light stays on, the
vehicle should be taken to an authorized
GM dealer as soon as possible for service.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
on page 149.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
You have this light on
the instrument panel.
It will light whenever the
DRL are on. It is also
a reminder to turn
on your headlamps
when driving at night.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This message is
displayed when the
tow/haul mode has
been activated.
Check Gages Warning Light
United States
Canada
This light will come on briefly when you are
starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are
driving, check your coolant temperature and
engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in
the warning zones.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in
Towing a Trailer on page 266.
185
Fuel Gage
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you
about how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you
are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as
soon as possible.
186
Listed are four situations you may experience with
your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the fuel gage indicated. For example, the
gage may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a
corner or speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you
turn off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 228. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you
can help avoid distraction while driving.
187
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety
belts, parking brake, and other functions
of your vehicle operate through the
radio/entertainment system. If that equipment
is replaced or additional equipment is added
to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle
before installing it. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 286.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 122 for more information.
188
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for
two seconds. Then press HR until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold MIN until
the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
To synchronize the time with an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)
information, press and hold the hour and minute
buttons at the same time until RDS TIME appears
on the display. To accept this time, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same
time, for another two seconds. If the time is
not available from the station, NO UPDAT (update)
will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After
tuning to an RDS broadcast station, it may take
a few minutes for the time to update.
The radio may have a button marked with an
H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to
represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct
hour appears on the display. Press and hold
the minute button until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time can be set with the
ignition on or off.
189
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
190
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for more than four seconds until you
hear two beeps. The radio goes to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, plays for a few
seconds, then goes to the next preset station. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUDIO: To adjust the bass and the treble, press
and release AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE
(treble) appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to increase or
to decrease. If a station is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,
select BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO
for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. B and a zero or T and a zero appears on
the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first end out
of audio mode by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to time
of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN (center)
appears on the display.
191
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release the
AUDIO button until BAL (balance) appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up or
the down arrow to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release AUDIO until
FAD (fade) appears on the display. Then press
and hold the up or the down arrow to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all
radio systems.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FAD. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. B and a zero or F and a zero appears
on the display.
192
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first end out
of audio mode by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to time
of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN appears
on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio with CD
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display shows the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for more than four seconds until you
hear two beeps. The radio goes to the first preset
station stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a few
seconds, then goes to the next preset station. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio only seeks and scans stations, with a
strong signal, that are in the selected band.
193
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, press
and release the AUDIO button until BAS (bass)
or TRE (treble) appears on the display. Then press
and hold the up or the down arrow to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.
194
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,
select BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the
AUDIO button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. B and a zero or T and a zero
appears on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first end out
of audio mode by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the time of
day. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
CEN (center) appears on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release the
AUDIO button until BAL (balance) appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up or
the down arrow to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button
until FAD (fade) appears on the display. Then
press and hold the up or the down arrow to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FAD. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. B and a zero or F and a zero appears
on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first end out
of audio mode by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the time of
day. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
CEN appears on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing. CD appears on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the RCL knob.
If you insert a CD with the radio off and the
ignition on, it starts to play
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
195
As each new track starts to play, the track number
appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 225 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
196
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go
to the beginning of the current track if more
than eight seconds have played. The track number
appears on the display. If this pushbutton is
held or pressed more than once, the player
continues moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. The track number appears on the display.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving forward
through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track appears on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track appears on the display.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RND appears on the display. Press RDM
again to turn off random play. OFF appears on the
display.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to
hear a track over again. RPT appears on the
display. The current track continues to repeat.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. OFF
appears on the display.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous track. The
track number appears on the display. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the current
track number or how long the current track has
been playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD appears on the display if a CD
is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and
radio off if this button is pressed first.
If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player. If the
CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after you have tried to push it manually.
The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at
each press of eject, causing the player to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has
elapsed.
197
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
198
Radio with Cassette and CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station may broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters appear on the display
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may
also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)
for current programming, and the name of the
program being broadcast.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
To change the default on the display, press the
INFO knob until you see the desired display,
then hold the knob until you hear a beep.
The selected display is now the default.
199
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL
appears on the display. Each higher setting
provides more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off, press
this button until AVOL OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous
station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
200
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop
scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than
four seconds. PSCN appears on the display and
you will hear a double beep. The radio goes
to a preset station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next preset station. Press either
the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop
scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2 and six AM),
can be programed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn
the knob to increase or to decrease. The display
shows the bass or treble level. If a station is weak
or has static, decrease the treble.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2 or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set returns for
that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to
select the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization is set for that
preset station.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The
radio produces one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED appears on the display, you will
hear a beep, and the display level adjusts to
the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,
and classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass
and treble settings.
The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
201
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release the
AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob
until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob
to move the sound toward the front or the rear
speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again
and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance and fade adjusts to the middle
position and the display shows the speaker
balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED appears on the display, you will
hear a beep, and the display level adjusts to
the middle position.
202
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY appears
on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows
to select and to take you to the PTY’s first
station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and
the PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE
or the SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is
not displayed, go back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
exit program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE appears on the display and the radio
returns to the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and the last selected
PTY appears on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio begins scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger
station with the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
two seconds. AF ON appears on the display.
The radio may switch to stations with a stronger
frequency.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS)
These buttons have factory PTY presets.
Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and the last selected
PTY appears on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the PTY that was set returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF appears on
the display. The radio does not switch to other
stations.
203
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol appears on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, it
means that the radio has not been configured
properly for the vehicle and must be returned to
your dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words appears on the
display after every press of the button. Once the
complete message has displayed, the information
symbol disappears from the display until another
new message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
204
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes
that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.
Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not
work well in this player. The longer side with
the tape visible should face to the right. If you hear
nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may
not be in squarely. Press the eject button to
remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject
button or the INFO knob to insert and to begin play
of a tape. If the ignition is on and the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and begins playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO,
and SEEK controls just as you do for the
radio. The cassette tape symbol appears on the
display and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing. The tape player plays the other
side of the tape when it reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players
works in the cassette tape player. See “CD
Adapter Kits” later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette
Tape Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection
for previous to work. Press this pushbutton to
go to the previous selection on the tape if
the current selection has been playing for less
than three seconds. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing from three to
13 seconds, it goes to the beginning of the
previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the
tape. If pressed when the current selection has
been playing for more than 13 seconds, it goes to
the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number appears on the
display while the cassette player is in the previous
mode. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times
increases the number of selections to be searched
back, up to −9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection
for next to work. Press this pushbutton to go
to the next selection on the tape. Pressing this
pushbutton multiple times, in next mode, increases
the number of selections to be searched forward.
SEEK and a positive number appears on the
display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to
quickly reverse the tape. The radio plays while the
tape reverses. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The station frequency and REV appears
on the display. Select stations during reverse
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
205
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio plays while the tape
advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD
appears on the display. Select stations during
forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other
side of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the
same as the PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is
held or pressed more than once, the player
continues moving forward or backward through the
tape. SEEK and a positive or negative number
appears on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
The radio goes to the next selection, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next selection.
206
Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again,
to stop scanning. The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a cassette tape or CD is playing. The
inactive tape or CD remains safely inside the radio
for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio. The
inactive tape or CD remains safely inside the radio
for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when
it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio
off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message
appears on the display, the tape does not play
due to one of the following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn
the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the
tape with the open end down and try to
turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the
hubs do not turn easily, the tape may be
damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It still
plays tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See Care of the Cassette Tape Player on page 224.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY appears on the
display and the tape symbol on the display
flashes, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot.
It powers up the radio and begins playing.
The override feature remains active until the eject
button is pressed.
207
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition
off, first press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
208
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur,
check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If
the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your
CDs on page 225 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go
to the beginning of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. TRACK and the track
number appears on the display. If this pushbutton
is held or pressed more than once, the player
continues moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. TRACK and the track number appears
on the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player continues moving
forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold
this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
reverse at six times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track appears on
the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly advance within a track. Press and
hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
advance at six times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track appears on
the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM ON appears on the display. RDM T
and the track number appears on the display when
each track starts to play. Press this pushbutton
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF appears
on the display.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current or to the previous track. Press
the right arrow to go to the start of the next
track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the CD.
209
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds
until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again, to stop
scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how
long the current track has been playing. ET
and the elapsed time appears on the display.
To change the default on the display, track
or elapsed time, press the knob until you see
the desired display, then hold the knob for
two seconds. The radio produces one beep and
the selected display is now the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a cassette tape or CD is playing. The
inactive tape or CD remains safely inside the radio
for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio. The
inactive tape or CD remains safely inside the
radio for future listening.
210
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when
it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds, the
CD automatically pulls back into the player. If the
CD is pushed back into the player, before the
25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD several
times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after you have tried to push it manually.
The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at
each press of eject, causing the player to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has
elapsed.
CD Messages
Radio with Six-Disc CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Playing the Radio
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
211
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off,
press this knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
To change the default on the display, press the
INFO knob until you see the desired display, then
press and hold the knob until you hear a beep.
The selected display is now the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive
by increasing the volume as vehicle speed
increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL
appears on the display. Each higher setting
provides more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
212
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous
station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than
four seconds. PSC appears on the display and you
will hear a double beep. The radio goes to a preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Middle/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob
until BASS, MID, or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display shows the bass, midrange, or treble level.
If a station is weak or has static, decrease the
treble.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the
station that was set returns for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to
select the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization is set for that
preset station.
3. To resave the preset, press and hold the
preset button until a beep is heard.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO
knob. The radio produces one beep and adjusts
the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker controls are displayed.
ALL CENTERED appears on the display and
you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,
and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO
EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, and
treble using the AUDIO knob.
213
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Data System (RDS)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release the
AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
FAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear
speakers.
The fade feature may not be available on all radio
systems.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob while
BAL or FAD is displayed. The radio produces one
beep and adjusts the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
while no tone or speaker controls are displayed.
ALL CENTERED appears on the display and
you will hear a beep.
214
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station may broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters appear on the display
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may
also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)
for current programming, and the name of the
program being broadcast.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY appears on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press
either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select
and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To cancel the seek, press any of the TYPE or
SEEK arrows. This also exits the program
type seek mode and returns to the last tuned
station.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY appears on the display.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio begins scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger
station with the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
two seconds. AF ON appears on the display.
The radio may switch to stations with a stronger
frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF appears on
the display. The radio does not switch to other
stations.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
215
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.
Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY appears on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the PTY that was set returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO appears on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
216
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words appears on the
display after every press of this button. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO
disappears from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, it
means that the radio has not been configured
properly for the vehicle and must be returned to
your dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 225 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
217
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right
of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light,
located to the right of the slot, begins to flash
and MULTI LOAD # appears on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # appears on the display, load a
CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light
begins flashing again. Once the light stops
flashing and turns green, you can load another
CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Do not try to load more than six.
218
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
CDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the
loading function. The radio begins to play the last
CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number
for each CD appears on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the
CD AUX button (if not already in CD mode), then
press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds
to the CD. A small bar appears under the CD
number that is playing and the track number
appears on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
CD Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press
and release this button.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after you have tried to push it in
manually. The player’s 25-second eject timer
resets at each press of eject, causing the player to
not eject the CD until the 25-second time period
has elapsed.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for
five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light,
located to the right of the slot, begins to flash
and EJECT ALL appears on the display.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #
appears on the display. The CD ejects and
can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light
begins flashing again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD
or the eject button.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of
the track appears on the display. Release the
button to play the passage.
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of
the track appears on the display. Release the
button to play the passage.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
CD automatically pulls back into the player.
If CD is pushed back into the player, before the
25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD several
times before stopping.
219
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire
CD can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the RPT button. RPT appears on
the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press
and hold the RPT button for two seconds.
RPT appears on the display. Press RPT again
to turn off repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order, on one CD or on all of the CDs. To use
random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release the RDM
button. RANDOM ONE appears on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and hold RDM for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and RANDOM ALL appears on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
220
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting
while playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information
on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously
in this section.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current track (if more than 10 seconds have
played), or to go to the previous track (if less than
10 seconds have played). Press the right arrow to
go to the next track. If either arrow is held or
pressed more than once, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until
CD SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds
of the first track of each loaded CD. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how
long the current track has been playing. To change
the default on the display, track or elapsed time,
press the knob until you see the desired display,
then press and hold the knob until the radio beeps.
The selected display is now the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in
this section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not appear on
the display. If S-LIST is present, press the
SONG LIST button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
or TYPE right arrow to locate the track to
be saved. The track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to
save the track into memory. When SONG
LIST is pressed, one beep will sound.
After two seconds of continuously pressing
the SONG LIST button, two beeps will sound
to confirm the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
S-LIST FULL appears on the display if you try to
save more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep will sound and S-LIST appears
on the display. The recorded tracks begins to
play in the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or
TYPE arrows. Seeking past the last saved
track returns to the first saved track.
221
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list
on. S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select
the desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will sound. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST
button, two beeps will sound to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
222
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list
on. S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
more than four seconds. One beep will sound,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will sound after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY appears on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
saved to the song list again are added to the
bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep will sound and S-LIST is
removed from the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOC will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
223
Radio Reception
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.
If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly
can cause reduced sound quality, ruined
cassettes, or a damaged mechanism. Cassette
tapes should be stored in their cases away
from contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme
heat. If they are not, they may not operate properly
or may cause failure of the tape player.
AM
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. The radio may display
CLEAN to indicate that the tape player has been
used for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean
timer. If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
If there is a reduction in sound quality, try a known
good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is
at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in
sound quality, clean the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
224
For best results, use a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which
scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner
cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette
is available through your dealer.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette,
it is possible that the cassette may eject, because
the cut tape detection feature on the radio may
recognize it as a broken tape, in error. To prevent
the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the
display and the cassette symbol will flash for
five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the
manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected,
the cut tape detection feature will be active
again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which
uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape
head can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the
eject button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN
indicator. The radio will display --- or CLEANED to
show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound
quality may degrade over time. Always make sure
the cassette tape is in good condition before
the tape player is serviced.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
225
Care of the CD Player
Chime Level Adjustment
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. To change the volume level of the chime,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level
will change from the normal level to loud,
and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume
level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will appear on the radio display.
Each time the chime volume is changed,
three chimes will sound to indicate the change.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with
a factory radio or chime module will disable
vehicle chimes.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench
one quarter turn.
226
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 228
Defensive Driving ...................................... 228
Drunken Driving ........................................ 229
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 232
Braking ...................................................... 232
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 233
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 235
Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 235
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 235
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 238
Steering .................................................... 239
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 241
Passing ..................................................... 241
Loss of Control .......................................... 243
Driving at Night ......................................... 244
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 245
City Driving ............................................... 248
Freeway Driving ........................................ 249
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 250
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 251
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 252
Winter Driving ........................................... 254
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 258
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 258
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 259
Towing ........................................................ 264
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 264
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 264
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 266
227
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 17.
228
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
229
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking three
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally
will reach a higher BAC level than a man of
her same body weight will when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
230
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will
be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be
able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
231
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They are
the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator.
All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 286.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 175.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
232
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with the ABS, this
warning light will stay
on. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light
on page 176.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 286.
233
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
234
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have
time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some
noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle
most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels
has no traction and the other does, this feature will
allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it combines
anti-lock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to ensure that it is working properly. You
may hear or feel the system working. This is
normal and does not mean there is a problem with
your vehicle. The system should initialize before
the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In
some cases, it may take approximately 2 miles
(3.2 km) of driving before the system initializes.
235
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® not ready light and the StabiliTrak® indicator light.
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Off
Off
Off
Flashing
Off
On
On
Off
On
Flashing
Meaning
StabiliTrak® is enabled, but not
active.
The traction control is not active.
StabiliTrak® is active, or the traction
control is active.
StabiliTrak® is disabled due to
system fault. When on after
restarting, the vehicle needs to be
serviced.
StabiliTrak® is disabled due to
system initialization or the driver has
disabled with switch.
StabiliTrak® is not initialized and not
disabled.
The traction control is active.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light on page 177 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on
page 177.
236
Pressing and holding
the StabiliTrak® button
located on the
instrument panel for
more than five seconds
can turn off StabiliTrak®
and part of the
traction control system.
For your safety, the system can only be disabled
when the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph
(32 km/h). You will hear three chimes and the
StabiliTrak® not ready light will come on.
To turn on the StabiliTrak® system, press the
StabiliTrak® button again. StabiliTrak® will
automatically turn back on when the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h). You will hear one chime
and the StabiliTrak® not ready light will turn off.
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off
you may still hear system noises as a result of
the brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. See If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 258.
StabiliTrak® System Operation
The StabiliTrak® system is normally on, except
when the system is initializing or has been
disabled with the StabiliTrak® button. The
StabiliTrak® system will automatically activate to
assist the driver in maintaining vehicle directional
control in most driving conditions. When
activated, the StabiliTrak® system may reduce
engine power to the wheels and apply braking to
individual wheels as necessary to assist the
driver with vehicle directional control. If your
vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® indicator light on the
instrument panel will flash, and the cruise control
will automatically disengage. When the
StabiliTrak® system is no longer active, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Control on page 151.
237
The StabiliTrak® system may also turn off
automatically if it determines that a problem exists
with the system. If the problem does not clear
itself after restarting the vehicle, you should see
your dealer for service.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels
(engine speed management) and by applying
brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction
control) as necessary.
If the brake-traction control system activates
constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to
high speed braking, the brake-traction control will
be automatically disabled. The system will come
back on after the brakes have cooled. This can
take up to two minutes or longer depending on
brake usage.
238
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/
downshifts of the transmission. When this happens
you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may
hear a noise or vibration. This is normal.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 286 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s
driving power is sent to all four wheels for
extra traction when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no
separate lever or switch to engage or disengage
the front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself
as needed for road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions.
This is normal and is an indication that the
all-wheel drive system is functioning properly.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is
the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you
approach a curve, do it before you enter the
curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 286.
239
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes
you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 232. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
240
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,
and to crossroads for situations that might
affect your passing patterns. If you have any
doubt whatsoever about making a successful
pass, wait for a better time.
241
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
242
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
•
•
•
•
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
243
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
244
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
245
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a
heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the
road, and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good
shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace
your windshield wiper inserts when they show
signs of streaking or missing areas on the
windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
{CAUTION:
246
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and
be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 342.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
247
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
248
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 249.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
249
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower than
you actually are.
250
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across
North America. They will be ready and willing to
help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
251
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
252
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
253
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a
flashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 342.
254
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 233.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
255
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
256
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe and/or the fuel operated
heater exhaust system, if equipped. And
check around again from time to time to
be sure snow does not collect there. If
your vehicle has a diesel engine and a
fuel operated heater, see “Fuel Operated
Heater (FOH)” in the diesel engine
supplement.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery (or batteries)
charged. You will need a well-charged battery
(or batteries) to restart the vehicle, and possibly for
signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again and repeat this only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little
as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half
hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
257
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 360.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transmission or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
258
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as
little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By
slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
your vehicle out after a few tries, it may need to be
towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 264.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
259
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 342 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 350.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
260
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
a Trailer on page 266 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
261
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
262
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows
the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
263
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 424.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a
motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”
following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind
a motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy”
(towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground) and “dolly” (towing your vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on
a device known as a “dolly”).
264
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Rear Towing
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal
lubrication while being towed.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. To properly
tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a
platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, or even
with only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow
an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
from the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 128 for more information.
3. Put the automatic transmission in PARK (P).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions
to attach and secure the vehicle being
towed to the dolly and then the loaded dolly to
the tow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are
straight before towing.
Use an adequate clamping device to ensure
that the front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
265
5. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent your battery from draining
while towing.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
two wheels on the ground. To properly tow
these vehicles, they should be placed on a
platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, or even
with only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow
an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer
for advice and information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
that would not be covered by your warranty.
Always follow the instructions in this section
and check with your dealer for more information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
266
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,
braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• See also “Driving on Grades” later in this
section.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
267
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is
most useful while pulling such a load in rolling
terrain, in stop-and-go traffic, or when you need
improved low-speed control, such as when parking.
The purpose of the tow/haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the
predictability of transmission shifts,
• provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded,
• improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity.
Press this button
located to the right of
the steering wheel
on the instrument panel
to turn tow/haul
mode on and off.
268
While activated, the
indicator light on the
instrument panel
will be on.
Tow/haul mode will turn off automatically when the
ignition is turned off. See Tow/Haul Mode Light
on page 185.
Tow/haul is most effective when the vehicle and
trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the
vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy
load will cause reduced fuel economy and
unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics, but will not cause damage.
Weight of the Trailer
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry.
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4300 V6
5300 V8
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5300 V8
G1500 Passenger
Van 2WD
4300 V6
5300 V8
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
The following charts show how much your trailer
can weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
Axle Ratio
3.42
3.42
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
4,300 lbs (1 950 kg)
GCWR*
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Axle Ratio
3.42
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.42
3.42
3.73
3,900 lbs (1 769 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
269
H1500 Passenger
Van AWD
5300 V8
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD
Short Wheelbase
4800 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD
Long Wheelbase
4800 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
270
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.42
3.73
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 220 kg)
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
GCWR*
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
G2500 Passenger Van
2WD Short Wheelbase
4800 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD
Short Wheelbase
4800 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD
Long Wheelbase
4800 V8
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
GCWR*
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
GCWR*
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
(5 443 k3)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
GCWR*
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
18,500 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(8 391 kg)
271
G3500 Passenger Van
2WD Short Wheelbase
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
G3500 Passenger Van
2WD Long Wheelbase
6000 V8
6600 V8 Diesel
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
7,700 lbs (3 483 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
17,000 lbs (7 711 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
17,000 lbs (7 711 kg)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 422 for more
information.
272
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle.
If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 259 about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch ball closest
to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect
of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to get them right simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more
than the total of the additional weight.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B),
up to a maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight
carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should
be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B), up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) with a weight distributing hitch.
273
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a
GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10
percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the rear
axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater than
just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.
The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs
(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear
axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit
for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up
to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
274
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front
axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle
weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to
stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go
further and think you must limit tongue weight to
less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding
GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on
the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs
(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the
rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of
tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.
Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with
being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least
10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, you can
expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can
properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Certification label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 259. Then be sure you don’t go over
the GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use
a weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t
go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
275
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you
have ample room when turning to avoid contact
between the trailer and the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure
to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch
and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
You should always use a sway control if your
trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch
must be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains
the same both before and after coupling the
trailer to the tow vehicle.
276
If you’re using the wiring provided with the
factory-installed trailering package, you should not
need to make any holes in the body of your vehicle.
However, if you have an aftermarket hitch installed,
you may need to make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle as well as dirt and water.
See “Carbon Monoxide” under Engine Exhaust
on page 132.
Trailer Brakes
Safety Chains
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
your trailer brake system cannot tap into the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
277
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You can not see or smell CO. It
can cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 132. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with
the fan on any speed. This will bring
fresh, outside air into your vehicle.
CAUTION:
278
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use the climate control setting for
maximum air because it only recirculates
the air inside your vehicle. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical connection at
the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just
move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
279
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to
have extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal
flasher (included in the optional trailering package).
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing your signal
when they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
280
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will
boil at a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately
after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
your vehicle may show signs similar to engine
overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 311.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the
curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
281
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine
oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea
to review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package
includes a seven-wire harness assembly at
the rear of the vehicle and a four-wire harness
assembly under the left hand side of the
instrument panel. The seven-wire harness
assembly is taped together and located in a frame
pocket at the driver side rear left corner of the
frame. The seven-wire harness includes a 30-amp
feed wire.
282
Both harnesses come without connectors and
should be wired by a qualified electrical technician.
The technician can use the following color code
chart when connecting the wiring harness to
your trailer and trailer brake controller.
Seven-Wire Harness
• Light Green: Back-up lamps
• Brown: Parking lamps
• Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
• Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal
• Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes
• Red/Black Stripe: Trailer accessory
• White (heavy gage): Ground wire
Four-Wire Harness (Trailer Brake Controller)
• Black: Ground
• Red/White Stripe: Fused Battery
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Feed
• Light Blue: Fused Stoplamp/CHMSL
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 286
Accessories and Modifications ................... 286
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 287
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 287
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...................................... 288
Fuel ............................................................. 288
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 289
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 289
California Fuel ........................................... 289
Additives ................................................... 290
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 291
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 292
Filling the Tank ......................................... 293
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 295
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 296
Hood Release ........................................... 296
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 298
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) .................... 299
Engine Oil Life System
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 302
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 304
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 305
Engine Coolant .......................................... 308
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 311
Engine Overheating ................................... 311
Cooling System ......................................... 313
Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 319
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 319
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 320
Brakes ...................................................... 321
Battery ...................................................... 325
Jump Starting ............................................ 326
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 332
Rear Axle .................................................... 333
Front Axle ................................................... 334
283
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Noise Control System ................................. 334
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited .............................................. 334
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 336
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 336
Headlamps ................................................ 336
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ....................................... 338
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ... 338
Taillamps ................................................... 339
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 340
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 340
Tires ............................................................ 342
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 343
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 347
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 350
284
Dual Tire Operation ................................... 351
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 352
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 354
Buying New Tires ...................................... 354
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 356
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 357
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 358
Wheel Replacement .................................. 358
Tire Chains ............................................... 360
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 361
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 362
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 363
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ....................................... 366
Secondary Latch System ........................... 373
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 376
Spare Tire ................................................. 378
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ........................................ 378
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 378
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 380
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 381
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 381
Weatherstrips ............................................ 381
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 382
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 382
Finish Care ............................................... 382
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 383
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 384
Tires ......................................................... 385
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 385
Finish Damage .......................................... 385
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 386
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 386
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 387
Vehicle Identification .................................. 388
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 388
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 388
Electrical System ........................................ 389
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 389
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 389
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 389
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 389
Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 390
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 391
Capacities and Specifications .................... 394
285
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
286
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt
any vehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 437.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 96.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 414.
287
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
“Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System”
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
288
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, GM recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number
that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at
the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 388.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN
Code Z), you may use either regular unleaded
gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
on page 291. In all other gasoline engines,
use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See the
underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not
available in states adopting California emissions
standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 178. If this occurs, return
to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines
may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommends
against the use of gasolines containing MMT.
See Additives on page 290 for additional
information.
289
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
290
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number
that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at
the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 388.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline
or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);
also see Fuel on page 288. In all other engines,
use only the unleaded gasoline described under
Gasoline Octane on page 289.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN
Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). General
Motors encourages the use of E85 in vehicles that
are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/
locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel.
Those stations that do have E85 should have a
label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the
fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798. By definition, this means
that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content
between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank
with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the check engine light to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the
E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your
climate according to ASTM specification D 5798.
If you have trouble starting on E85, it may be
because your E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tank may
improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel
tank should contain no more than 70% ethanol.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it
is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons
(11 L) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle
immediately after refueling for at least seven
miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
291
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill your fuel tank more often
when using E85 than when you are using gasoline.
See Filling the Tank on page 293.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible
with E85 fuel and may harm your vehicle’s fuel
system. Damage caused by additives would
not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
292
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the
driver side of the
vehicle.
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap
with the words “E85/gasoline” can be seen.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
293
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open
the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can
happen if your tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to
stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or
overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after
you have finished pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 382.
294
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 178.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling,
do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the
flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or
by notifying the station attendant. Leave
the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer can get
one for you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 178.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with
Never fill a portable fuel container while
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is
inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk,
pickup bed, or on any surface other
than the ground.
CAUTION:
the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
(Continued)
295
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
or fuel operated heater (FOH) parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield
washer and other fluids, and plastic or
rubber. You or others could be burned.
Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine or fuel
operated heater (FOH).
296
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located in front
of the driver’s
side door frame
near the floor.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up
the secondary hood release, which is located
underneath the middle of the hood.
If your vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will
automatically come on and stay on until the hood
is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler
caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood
prop from the slot in the hood and return the
prop to its retainer. Let the hood down and
close it firmly.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot
in the hood.
297
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, here is what you will see:
298
A. Battery. See Battery on page 325.
B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 311.
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 313.
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 305.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on
page 299.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on
page 299.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 304.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 319.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 321.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 320.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine
Oil” in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
299
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 394.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could
be damaged.
300
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 298 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
301
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
(Gasoline Engine)
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
302
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A change engine oil light will
come on. See Change Engine Oil Light on
page 183. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service
people who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system. It is also important
to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a change engine oil light
being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the change engine oil light, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. If the Change Engine Oil light flashes for
five seconds, the system is reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment.
If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the
oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose
of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies
of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when
you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still
does not reset, see your dealer for service. See
Change Engine Oil Light on page 183.
303
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine)
on page 400 for more information. If you are
driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the
center of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 298 for more
information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval.
304
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge
as little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Make sure that the filter fits properly into
the housing.
5. Reinstall the cover and fasten the
retaining clips.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine)
on page 403, and be sure to use the transmission
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 410.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
305
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is
180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
drive the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine
temperature gage moves and then remains steady
for 10 minutes.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
306
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with
the engine off, but this is used only as a reference.
Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if
outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more.
If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid
hot will give you a more accurate reading of
the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 298
for more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transmission
dipstick is located near
the center of the
engine compartment
and will be labeled with
the graphic shown.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT or
cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure
to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way; then
flip the handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
307
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission
dipstick tube only after checking the transmission
fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a
reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT
area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the
handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
308
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 311.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
radiator and fuel operated heater (FOH)
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other liquid such as alcohol,
can boil before the proper coolant mixture
will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 410 for more information.
309
Checking Coolant for Gasoline Engines
Adding Coolant
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Checking
Coolant” under “Van Models” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement for information on checking
your vehicle’s coolant.
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
The coolant recovery
tank is located near the
center of the engine
compartment. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 298
for more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the COLD FILL mark, or a little higher.
310
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never have
to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 313.
The radiator pressure cap is located near the
center of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 298 for more
information on location.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage
on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 178 for more
information.
311
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
312
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see
or hear no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 266.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, you can drive normally.
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
If the warning continues, and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about
twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least
three minutes while you are parked. If you
still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to
get service help right away.
Cooling System
If your vehicle has a diesel engine,
see “Van Models” under “Cooling System”
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
313
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should
be at or above the COLD FILL mark. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater, fuel operated heater (FOH),
radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine
again. See if the engine cooling fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing
the accelerator pedal down. If it does not, your
vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
314
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner,
at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How
to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank”
under “Van Models” in the Cooling System section
of the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the
proper coolant fill procedure.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at the COLD FILL mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 308
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
315
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot components in the engine
compartment. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a
hot engine or components in the engine
compartment.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at the COLD FILL mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to
Add Coolant to the Radiator” under “Van Models”
in the Cooling System section of the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement for the proper radiator fill
procedure.
316
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. Do not
press down while turning the pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 308
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now
push down as you turn it. Remove the
pressure cap.
317
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
318
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.
When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster
to provide more air to cool the engine. In most
everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged.
This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages,
so you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts.
It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch partially
disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 298 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
319
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at
the fluid level on the dipstick.
What to Use
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never
check or fill the power steering reservoir with the
brake master cylinder cover off.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
320
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 298
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 298 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that
the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level
during normal brake lining wear. When new linings
are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other
reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes will not work well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake
fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak.
321
If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you
will have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine and/or fuel operated
heater parts, if equipped. If your vehicle
has a diesel engine and a fuel operated
heater, see “Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)”
in the diesel engine supplement. The fluid
will burn if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake
Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 400.
322
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off
the cap.
Look at the brake
fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should
be above MIN.
If it is not, have
your brake system
checked to see if
there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not
over the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 410.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and
the area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well,
or they may not even work at all. This
could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 382.
323
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means
that soon the brakes will not work well.
That could lead to an accident. When
you hear the brake wear warning sound,
have your vehicle serviced.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid
increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign
of brake trouble.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear.
324
Brake Adjustment
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and
work well together if the vehicle is to have really
good braking. Your vehicle was designed and
tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When
you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and
you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between
your front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have
come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 298 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
325
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 326 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
326
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds
to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles
are not touching each other. If they are,
it could cause a ground connection you do
not want. You would not be able to start
your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
327
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations of the
other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−)
jump starting terminal. You should always use
these remote terminals instead of the
terminals on the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located
behind a red plastic cover near the engine
accessory drive bracket on the driver’s side of
the engine compartment, below the alternator.
To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal,
open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on
the engine drive bracket on all V8 engines
and is marked GND (Ground).
On V6 engines the remote negative (−)
terminal is located on a tab attached to the
engine accessory drive bracket and is marked
GND (Ground).
328
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light. Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add water to
the battery installed in your new vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)
or you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too.
And do not connect the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
329
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on
the vehicle with the dead battery.
330
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal location
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal for this purpose. It is marked GND.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover
to its original position.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
331
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to
these vehicles. However, there are two additional
systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 400.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add
enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
332
Rear Axle
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 400.
If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is
from 5/8 inch (15 mm) to 1 5/8 inch (40 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole. The
proper level for the 2500 and 3500 Series is
from 0 to 1/4 (6 mm) below the bottom of the
filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to reach
the proper level.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
333
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant and when to
change it. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 400.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need
to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the
filler plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410.
Noise Control System
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance
with federal noise emission standards for vehicles
with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of
more than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance
Schedule provides information on maintaining
the noise control system to minimize degradation
of the noise emission control system during
the life of your vehicle. The noise control system
warranty is given in your warranty booklet.
334
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by
any person, other than for purposes of
maintenance, repair or replacement, of any
device or element of design incorporated into
any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control, prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or
element of design has been removed or
rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
• Removal of the noise shields or any
Fan and Drive:
• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,
or rendering clutch inoperative.
• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle
has one.
Air Intake:
• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
• Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.
Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) — Diesel
Engine:
• Removal of the muffler.
underhood insulation.
Engine:
• Removal or rendering engine speed governor,
if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to
allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
335
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 340.
To remove the headlamp assembly from the
vehicle and access the bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 296 for more information.
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in
this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
3. Remove the two pins on the top of the
headlamp assembly. To remove the pins,
turn the outer pin clockwise and pull it
straight up. To remove the inner pin, turn it
counterclockwise and pull it straight up.
336
4. Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to
release the inboard tab from the radiator
support.
5. Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to
release the outboard tab from the radiator
support.
6. Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical
adjustor to clear the tie bar.
7. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to
remove it from the grille.
8. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise
and pull it out of the housing.
9. Without removing the headlamp assembly
itself, remove the bulb socket from the back
of the headlamp on the driver’s side.
10. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter
turn to remove it from the socket.
11. On the passenger’s side, turn the bulb
clockwise one turn.
12. Install the new bulb into the socket then
reinstall it into the headlamp assembly.
13. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
337
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
To replace the front turn signal, sidemarker and/or
parking lamp bulb(s), do the following:
3. Remove the lamp from the grille.
4. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb
socket while turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb socket from the back of the
lamp assembly.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it
in the lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip
on the lamp.
2. Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch
the clip. Move the lamp outboard to loosen
the tabs.
338
The center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL)
is located above the rear doors at the center
of the vehicle.
To replace a bulb, do the following:
Taillamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the
two inboard nuts
from the inside
of the taillamp
assembly.
1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL
assembly.
2. Remove the assembly.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter
turn to remove it from the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reverse the steps to reinstall the assembly.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle,
as in a luggage carrier, care should be taken not
to block or damage the center high-mounted
stoplamp unit.
2. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward to clear
the studs.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly slightly upward
to release the lower clip.
4. Remove the three nuts on the taillamp
assembly.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly from the
vehicle.
339
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up, Rear Parking, Stoplamp,
and Turn Signal Lamp
3157
CHMSL
912
Front Parking and
Turn Signal Lamp
3157KX
Front Sidemarker Lamp
194
Headlamps
Composite High-Beam
9005
Composite Low-Beam
9006GS
6. Remove the bulb socket by squeezing the
tab on the side of the socket while turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
8. Install a new bulb.
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Sealed Beam Headlamp
H6054
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 400 for more
information on wiper blade inspection.
340
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To remove the type
with a release clip, do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
3. The insert has two notches at one end that
are locked by bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notched end, pull the insert
from the blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws. Then slide the insert all the way through
the blade claws at the opposite end.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both sides of the
insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade
assembly into the windshield.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot
locking tab. Pull down on the blade
assembly to release it from the wiper
arm hook.
341
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
CAUTION:
342
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 350.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
343
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading
on page 357.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 350
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
344
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 350 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 350 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
345
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
means a light truck tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
346
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed
ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 350.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
347
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
348
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 259.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 350 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 259.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 354.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 357.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 259.
349
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
350
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below
the driver’s door latch. This label shows your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the tire and loading information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 259. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the tire and loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel,
wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check
the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and
6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving.
For proper wheel nut tightening information, see
“Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Tire” later in this section, under Changing a Flat
Tire on page 362. Also see “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 394.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally
wears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will
wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the
tires periodically. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 352. Also see Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 400.
{CAUTION:
If you operate your vehicle with a tire
that is badly underinflated, the tire can
overheat. An overheated tire can lose
air suddenly or catch fire. You or others
could be injured. Be sure all tires
(including the spare) are properly inflated.
See Tires on page 342 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 350 for more information on proper tire
inflation.
351
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 354
and Wheel Replacement on page 358 for
more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the
cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 362.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see
Dual Tire Operation on page 351.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 400.
352
Single Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always
use the correct rotation patterns shown here when
rotating your vehicle’s tires. Do not include the
spare tire in the tire rotation, if the spare tire/wheel
assembly does not match your vehicle’s road
tires and wheels in size and type.
{CAUTION:
Dual Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always
use one of the correct rotation patterns shown
here when rotating your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure that vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each
side are lined up.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose after time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 362.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 259. Make certain that
all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 394.
353
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
354
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 343 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
355
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 354 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 286 for
additional information.
356
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
357
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
358
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any
of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is
replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel
nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper
torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on page 394.
{CAUTION:
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 362 for more
information.
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
359
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or
P245/75R16 or LT245/75R16 size tires,
do not use tire chains. They can damage
your vehicle because there is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in
a crash.
Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for
use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION:
360
(Continued)
(Continued)
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual
wheels and has a tire size other than P245/
75R16 or LT245/75R16, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must. Use
chains that are the proper size for your tires.
Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not
use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or spinning the wheels with chains
on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use the jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
361
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place.
Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.
See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 146
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
362
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain
in the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If you have a cargo van or a passenger van,
the equipment you will need is located in
the passenger side rear corner of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining
wing bolt and lift it off of
the mounting bracket.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
If you have a van with the 15-passenger seating
arrangement, the equipment you will need is
secured on the rear floor of the passenger side
of the vehicle.
363
To access the equipment, remove the retaining
wing bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
jack handle extension (B), jack handle (C),
wheel wrench (D), and the ratchet (E).
The spare tire is stored underneath the rear of
your vehicle. You will use the wheel wrench (D)
and the ratchet (E) to lower the spare tire from
the vehicle.
364
To lower the spare tire from the vehicle, do the
following:
1. Attach the wheel
wrench and ratchet,
with the DOWN side
facing you. The
wheel wrench has a
socket end and a flat
chisel end. Note that
there is an UP side
and a DOWN side
on the ratchet.
2. Put the flat chisel end of the wheel wrench
on an angle through the hole between the
body and the bumper. Be sure the flat
end connects into the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground. If the spare tire does
not lower to the ground, the secondary
latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower.
See Secondary Latch System on page 373.
365
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps,
loosen them by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The wheel nut caps are
designed to remain with the center cap.
Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place
the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot
on the wheel and gently pry it out.
4. When the tire has been lowered, pull the tire
toward you so you can reach the tire retainer
and pull it up through the wheel opening.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a
cab and chassis, refer to the information from
the body supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires
on your vehicle.
366
1. With the DOWN side facing you, use the
ratchet and wheel wrench to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.
2. Assemble the jack and tools for a front or
rear flat as follows:
Be sure that the ratchet has the UP mark facing
you. To assemble the jack handle and jack
handle extension, use the art and text following.
Front Position
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together
with the jack handle (B) and ratchet (C)
as shown. Be sure that the ratchet has the
UP mark facing you.
Connect the jack handle (B) and jack handle
extension (C) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
Rear Position
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with
the jack handle (B), jack handle extension (C)
and ratchet (D) as shown.
367
3. Position the jack
under the vehicle
as shown.
Rear Position
Front Position
368
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet
clockwise. Make sure the UP mark faces you.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
369
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
6. Take flat tire off of the mounting surface.
370
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust
or dirt from the
wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
8. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten
each wheel nut by
hand until the
wheel is held
against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
371
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 394
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 394
for the wheel nut torque specification.
372
10. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts
firmly. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
and in a crisscross sequence as shown.
11. Put the wheel cover or the center cap and
plastic wheel nut caps back on. Remove
any wheel blocks.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch
system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from
suddenly falling off the vehicle if the cable
holding the spare tire is damaged. For the
secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed
with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 376 for instructions on storing the spare tire
correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the under spare.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable
end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible, start this
procedure at Step 6.
373
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable
is exposed.
4. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension
to the jack. With the UP mark facing you,
slide the ratchet onto the end of the jack
handle extension. The set-up should look like
the picture above.
3. Connect the jack handle (C) and jack handle
extension (B) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
374
7. Lower the jack by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack
until the spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
5. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of
the jack under the center of the spare tire and
turn the handle clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
8. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable,
slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench
and insert the wheel wrench into the hoist
shaft hole above the bumper. Turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way. Be sure the DOWN mark
on the ratchet is facing you.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the secondary
latch has released. The spare tire is now
balancing on the jack.
375
9. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and
pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the
tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire
or secondary latch system cable has been
reinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.
Always reinstall this cable before driving your
vehicle.
10. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn
the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare or
flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has
been repaired or replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4
of Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire on page 366.
376
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.
4. With the UP side facing you, attach the
ratchet to the wheel wrench.
5. Put the flat end of the wheel wrench on an
angle through the hole in the rear door
frame, above the bumper.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until
the tire is secure and the cable is tight.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the
tire moves, use the ratchet to tighten the cable.
You will hear two clicks when the tire is up all
the way.
8. Return the jacking equipment to the proper
location. Secure the items and replace the
jack cover.
377
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare
tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 350 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 259 for information regarding proper tire
inflation and loading your vehicle. For instructions
on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
on page 366 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 376.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use
on your vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Have
the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto
your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
378
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together. If your vehicle has a spare
tire that does not match your vehicle’s original road
tires and wheels in size and type, do not include
the spare tire in the tire rotation.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove
any accidental over-spray from other surfaces
immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner
directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object
to remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior
and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon
(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
379
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no more can
be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
380
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and
gently rub toward the center. Continue
cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 410.
381
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 382.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of
the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not
use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be
sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 387. Do not
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not
allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches
and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water
to enter the vehicle.
382
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 387.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly
to keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may
use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel
trim, if necessary.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form
when it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the
wiper blades and affect their performance.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a
cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer
solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
383
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
384
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish should be repaired right away.
Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
385
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal
and dust control can collect on the underbody.
If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts such as fuel
lines, frame, floor pan, fuel operated heater (FOH)
and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the underbody with plain water. Clean
any areas where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer
or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
386
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
387
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can
see it if you look through the windshield from
outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels
and the certificates of title and registration.
388
You will find this label on the front passenger door
frame. It is very helpful if you ever need to
order parts. On this label you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 96.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the
engine compartment fuse block. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to flicker on and off,
or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. Although the circuit is
protected from electrical overload, overload due
to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper linkage
damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
389
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located under the
driver’s seat.
Fuse
4
5
6
7
8
Fuse
1
2
3
390
Usage
Spare
Outside Rear View Mirror
Courtesy Lamp/SEO
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
32
33
Usage
Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal
Cargo Locks
Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal
Driver Locks
Stop/Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp
Climate Control 1
Climate Control
Brakes
Heated Mirror/Defogger
Right Rear Blower
Driver Turn Mirror
Door Locks
Upfitter Park
Not Available
Left Rear Park Lamp
Pass Turn Mirror
Right Rear Park Lamp
Trailer Park Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Auxiliary 1
Auxiliary 2
Relays
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Usage
Window Retained Accessory Power
Auxiliary
Rear Window Defogger
Courtesy Lamp
Cargo Unlock
Driver Unlock
Park Lamp
Door Locks
Passenger Unlock
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Circuit Breaker
Usage
34
Power Window
Fuse
1
2
3
4
Usage
Radio Battery
Powertrain Control Module
Battery (Gas), FOH, Engine
Control Module, Transmission
Control Module Battery (Diesel)
Left Rear Turn Lamp
Right Rear Turn Lamp
391
Fuse
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
392
Usage
Back-up Lamps Trailer Wiring
Ignition 0
Stoplamp
Rear Defogger/Heated Mirror
Right Daytime Running
Lamp/Turn Signal
Left Daytime Running
Lamp/Turn Signal
Truck Body Control Module 4
Fuel Pump
Trailer
Hazard Flashers
Horn
Truck Body Control Module 3
Trailer Stop/Turn Signal
Truck Body Control Module 2
Truck Body Control Module
Remote Function Actuator
Engine 2 (Gas), Spare (Diesel)
Ignition E
Engine 1
Truck Body Control Module
Ignition 1
Spare (Gas), Fuel Heater (Diesel)
Fuse
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Usage
Inside Rearview Mirror
Crankcase
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Cigarette Lighter
Instrument Panel Cluster
Air Conditioning
Spare (Gas), Engine Control
Module (Diesel)
Canister Vent Solenoid (Gas),
Rear Fog Lamps (Diesel)
Spare (Gas & LLY Diesel),
Fan Clutch (LMM Diesel)
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,
Vehicle Back-Up
Airbag
Powertrain Control Module
Ignition 1 (Gas), Engine Control
Module, Transmission Control
Module, Glow Plug Control
Module Ignition 1 (Diesel)
Oxygen Sensor B (Gas),
Spare (Diesel)
Oxygen Sensor A (Gas),
Spare (Diesel)
Fuse
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
63
64
Usage
Windshield Wipers
Right Headlamp - Low Beam
Left Headlamp - Low Beam
Left Headlamp - High Beam
Right Headlamp - High Beam
Truck Body Controller- Accessory
(Gas), Truck Body Controller,
Transmission Control Module
Accessory (Diesel)
Front Windshield Wiper
Anti-lock Brakes, Vehicle Stability
Enhancement System
Ignition A
Trailer
Climate Control Blower
Ignition B
Spare (Gas), Engine Control
Module Actuator (Diesel)
Spare
Relays
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SPARE (G),
ECM (D)
STRTR
Usage
Windshield Wiper
Air Conditioning
Spare (Gas), Rear Fog
Lamps (Diesel)
Headlamp - High Beam
Fuel Pump
Headlamp - Low Beam
Horn
Spare (Gas), Engine
Control Module (Diesel)
Starter
Circuit Breaker
PWR SEAT
Power Seat
Usage
393
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410 for more information. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate
level or as recommended in this manual.
See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4300 V6
11.0 qt
10.4 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 5300 V8 Flexible Fuel
13.4 qt
12.7 L
6000 V8
14.8 qt
14.0 L
4300 V6
14.0 qt
13.2 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 5300 V8 Flexible Fuel
16.4 qt
15.5 L
6000 V8
17.8 qt
17.0 L
4300 V6
4.5 qt
4.3 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 5300 V8 Flexible Fuel
6.0 qt
5.7 L
6000 V8
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Cooling System with Rear Heat
Engine Oil with Filter
394
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
Standard Tank (Passenger and Cargo)
31.0 gal
117.3 L
Standard Tank (Cab and Chassis)
33.0 gal
124.9 L
Optional Tank (Cab and Chassis)*
57.0 gal
215.7 L
* 159 inch (4 039 mm) wheelbase or 177 inch (4 496 mm) wheelbase only
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4300 V6
X
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
V
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
T
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300
V8 Flexible Fuel
Z
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
395
✍ NOTES
396
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 398
Introduction ............................................... 398
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 398
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 398
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 399
Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 400
Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 403
Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 404
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 406
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) .................. 406
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 407
At Least Once a Month ............................. 407
At Least Once a Year ............................... 408
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 410
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ................................. 412
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 413
Maintenance Record .................................. 414
397
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
398
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not
know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in very
hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 259.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 289.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 400 should be performed when
indicated. See Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine) on page 403 and Maintenance
Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) on page 404 for
further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 287.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
399
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 437.
Owner Checks and Services on page 406 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 410 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 412.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
400
Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
When the change engine oil light comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
(Gasoline Engine) on page 302 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the
system.
When the change engine oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following
for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service
be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
change engine oil light comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 299.
Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on
page 302. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 304. See footnote (l).
•
401
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 352 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 407.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Inspect shields, vehicles with GVWR above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only.
See footnote (g).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (m).
•
402
Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 304.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
25,000
(40 000)
•
50,000
(80 000)
•
75,000
(120 000)
•
100,000
(160 000)
•
125,000
(200 000)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
403
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (k).
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine)
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, and rear driveline center
splines.
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall
liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful
life. We, however, urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the indicated
intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
404
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect
power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn or
damaged or that streak or miss areas of the
windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges,
hood prop rod pivot, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment hinges, latches, locks,
fuel door hinge, and any moving seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(g) Vehicles with Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect
shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable to vehicles sold in the
United States and recommended for vehicles
sold in Canada.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or
delivery service.
405
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 308 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and
condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
406
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 410.
At the First 100, 1,000 and
6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel
nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 394.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood
checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 299 for further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper
level can cause damage to your engine
not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 350. Check to make sure the
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 362.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 352.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 308 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary.
407
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 128.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
408
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 128.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only
in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or others
could be injured and property could be
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of your vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
409
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil (Gasoline
Engine) on page 299.
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 308.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
410
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, in
Canada 88861801).
One-Piece
Propshaft Slip
Yoke Spline,
Two-Piece
Propshaft
Slip-in-Tube
Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel bearing lubricant
meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category GC or GC-LB
(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344, in
Canada 993037).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) or equivalent
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Front and
Rear Axle
411
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained by your
GM dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
15153904
A1621C
4300 V6
25010792
PF47
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 5300 V8 Flexible Fuel, 6000 V8
89017524
PF48
4300 V6
12607234
41-993
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 5300 V8 Flexible Fuel, 6000 V8
12571164
41-985
15153642
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
22 inches (56.0 cm)
412
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V6 Engine
V8 Engine
413
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 398.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 406 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
414
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
415
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
416
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 418
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 418
Online Owner Center ................................. 421
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 422
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 422
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 423
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 424
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 428
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ............................ 431
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 432
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 436
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 436
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 436
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 436
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 437
417
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by
your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the
matter has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
418
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the
Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.
General Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
419
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
420
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
421
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the
letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
422
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
423
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
424
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).
Service to provide diesel may be restricted. For
safety reasons, propane and other alternative
fuels will not be provided through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration and
personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized dealership.
In the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
tire, installation of the tire in good condition will
be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it is best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
425
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to
be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
426
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100
upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty,
and the duration of the Base Warranty Coverage for
Canadian customers of the new Vehicle Limited
Warranty. However, any cost for parts and labor
for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility of
the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type
of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are only a
phone call away. U.S. customers call Chevrolet
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
427
Courtesy Transportation
Scheduling Service Appointments
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
428
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience
by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty
repairs, and public transportation is used as
‘shuttle service,’ the reimbursement is limited
to the associated shuttle allowance and must
be supported by original receipts. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
429
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
430
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help
the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving
situations. Some information may be stored during
regular operations to facilitate repair of detected
malfunctions; other information is stored only in a
crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about
the condition of the vehicle and how it was
operated, such as data related to engine speed,
brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness,
airbag performance, and the severity of a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
steering performance, including yaw rate, steering
wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is also
recorded. This information has been used to
improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future
vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
431
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Collision Parts
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
432
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
433
If an Accident Occurs
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 424 for more
information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a card
from the tow truck operator or write down the
driver’s name, the service’s name, and the
phone number.
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will
need from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company
from the scene of the accident. They will walk
you through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to the
police department headquarters the next day
and you can get a copy of the report for a
nominal fee. In some states/provinces with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
434
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair
facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it
towed there. Specify to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will
not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you
must live with the repair. Depending on your
policy limits, your insurance company may initially
value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss
this with your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle
is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair
and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
435
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
436
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly
hope you will notify General Motors. Please
call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from
Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit
repair service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
437
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner manual
will include the Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
438
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices
are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 286
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 158
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 97
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 290
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 389
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 304
Air Conditioning ........................................... 160
Airbag
Off Light .................................................. 170
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 172
Readiness Light ....................................... 169
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 431
Airbag System ............................................... 78
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 97
Airbag Off Switch ....................................... 86
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 84
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 89
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 96
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 84
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 84
Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 82
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 80
All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 332
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 238
AM-FM Radio .............................................. 190
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 226
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 233
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 176
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 384
Care of Safety Belts ................................ 381
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 386
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 382
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 378
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 380
Finish Care .............................................. 382
Finish Damage ......................................... 385
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 381
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 385
Tires ........................................................ 385
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 386
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 387
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 382
Weatherstrips ........................................... 381
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 383
439
Ashtray(s) ....................................................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
AM-FM Radio ..........................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ..........
Care of Your CD Player ...........................
Care of Your CDs ....................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Radio with Cassette and CD ....................
Radio with CD .........................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ............................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ............................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
440
159
187
190
224
226
225
226
226
198
193
211
189
189
223
224
305
125
B
Battery ........................................................
Run-Down Protection ...............................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................
Emergencies ............................................
Parking ....................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Brakes ........................................................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...............................
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps .....................................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamps ...............................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps ..................................................
Buying New Tires ........................................
325
158
250
233
235
128
175
321
232
235
120
336
338
338
336
336
340
339
354
C
Calibration ................................................... 134
California Fuel ............................................. 289
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 287
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 394
Carbon Monoxide ...................... 132, 254, 266
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 381
Your Cassette Tape Player ....................... 224
Your CD Player ........................................ 226
Your CDs ................................................. 225
Cargo Door Relocking ................................. 109
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 338
Center Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ........................................ 33, 34
Chains, Tire ................................................. 360
Charging System Light ................................ 174
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 178
Gages Warning Light ............................... 185
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 296
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 386
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47
Infants and Young Children ........................ 44
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 54
Older Children ........................................... 41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position .......................................... 66
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position or the Second
Row Center Seat Position ...................... 63
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position .......................... 68, 72
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 51
Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 226
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 159
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 384
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 382
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 380
Finish Care .............................................. 382
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 378
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 381
Tires ........................................................ 385
441
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 386
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 382
Weatherstrips ........................................... 381
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 383
Climate Control System ............................... 160
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 162
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System ................................................. 164
Rear Heating System ............................... 163
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 432
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 37
Compass ..................................................... 134
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 232
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 178
Heater, Engine ......................................... 124
Cooling System ........................................... 313
Cruise Control ............................................. 151
Cruise Control Light .................................... 184
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 428
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .......................................... 422
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 422
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 418
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 423
442
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .....................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
436
436
436
424
437
D
Daytime Running Lamps .............................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light .......
Defensive Driving ........................................
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp Override ..................................
Dome Lamps ...............................................
Door
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ......................
Cargo Door Relocking ..............................
Locks .......................................................
Power Door Locks ...................................
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Rear Doors ..............................................
Sliding Side Door .....................................
156
185
228
287
157
157
112
109
108
109
110
114
111
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 22
Driving
At Night ................................................... 244
City .......................................................... 248
Defensive ................................................. 228
Drunken ................................................... 229
Freeway ................................................... 249
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 252
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 245
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 258
Winter ...................................................... 254
Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 351
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Headlamp Wiring .....................................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
389
391
390
389
389
389
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 304
Battery ..................................................... 325
Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 183
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 178
Coolant .................................................... 308
Coolant Heater ......................................... 124
Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 178
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 413
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 298
Exhaust ................................................... 132
Fan Noise ................................................ 319
Fuel Regulator ......................................... 124
Oil ........................................................... 299
Oil Life System ........................................ 302
Overheating ............................................. 311
Reduced Power Light ............................... 184
Starting .................................................... 122
Entry Lighting .............................................. 158
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 431
Exit Lighting ................................................ 158
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 40
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 155
443
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
Front Axle ...................................................
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
E85 (85% Ethanol) ...................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
444
304
385
226
146
149
361
362
376
305
319
320
334
288
290
289
291
295
293
292
Fuel (cont.)
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Regulator .................................................
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
186
289
289
124
391
390
389
389
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .....................
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Voltmeter Gage ........................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
185
178
186
182
168
175
289
289
423
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 146
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 389
Headlamps .................................................. 336
Bulb Replacement .................................... 336
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 156
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 149
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 338
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 336
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 149
On Reminder ........................................... 156
Heater ......................................................... 160
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 184
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 251
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 252
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 296
Release ................................................... 296
Horn ............................................................ 146
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 22
Ignition Positions ......................................... 121
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 44
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 350
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 144
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 157
Cluster ..................................................... 167
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 326
K
Keyless Entry System ................................. 103
Keys ........................................................... 102
445
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 343
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 158
Dome ....................................................... 157
Dome Lamp Override ............................... 157
Exterior .................................................... 155
Reading ................................................... 158
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 54
Light
Airbag Off ................................................ 170
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 169
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 176
Brake System Warning ............................. 175
Change Engine Oil ................................... 183
Charging System ..................................... 174
Check Gages Warning ............................. 185
Cruise Control .......................................... 184
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 185
Highbeam On .......................................... 184
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 178
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 172
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 169
Reduced Engine Power ............................ 184
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 168
446
Light (cont.)
Security ...................................................
StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................
StabiliTrak® Not Ready .............................
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................
Lighting
Entry ........................................................
Exit ..........................................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Locking Rear Axle .......................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Cargo Door Relocking ..............................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Loss of Control ...........................................
183
177
177
185
158
158
259
235
110
109
108
110
109
110
243
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ....................
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................
At Least Once a Month ............................
At Least Once a Year ..............................
403
407
407
408
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ................ 406
Introduction .............................................. 398
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 404
Maintenance Record ................................ 414
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 398
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ............................... 412
Owner Checks and Services .................... 406
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 410
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 400
Using ....................................................... 399
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 398
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 178
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Manual Windows ......................................... 116
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ....... 134
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 134
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ................... 136
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 138
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 139
Outside Manual Mirror .............................. 136
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 138
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 421
N
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 120
Noise Control System, Tampering ................ 334
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 412
O
Odometer .................................................... 168
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 168
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 241
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 183
Engine ..................................................... 299
Pressure Gage ......................................... 182
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 302
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 41
Online Owner Center ................................... 421
Other Warning Devices ................................ 146
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 162
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 158
Outside
Camper-Type Mirrors ................................ 136
Convex Mirror .......................................... 138
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 139
447
Outside (cont.)
Manual Mirror .......................................... 136
Power Mirrors .......................................... 138
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 406
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 385
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 129
Shifting Out of ......................................... 130
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 128
Over Things That Burn ............................ 131
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 172
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 89
Passing ....................................................... 241
Passlock® .................................................... 119
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 158
Door Locks .............................................. 109
Reduced Engine Light .............................. 184
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 122
Seat .......................................................... 10
Steering Fluid .......................................... 319
Windows .................................................. 117
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 40
448
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 21
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................
Radios ........................................................
AM-FM Radio ..........................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ..........
Care of Your CD Player ...........................
Care of Your CDs ....................................
Radio with Cassette and CD ....................
Radio with CD .........................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ............................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ............................
Theft-Deterrent .........................................
Understanding Reception .........................
Reading Lamps ...........................................
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System .......................................
Rear Axle ....................................................
Locking ....................................................
Rear Door Security Locks ...........................
311
187
190
224
226
225
198
193
211
189
189
223
224
158
164
333
235
110
Rear Doors ................................................. 114
Rear Heating System .................................. 163
Rear Outside Passenger Positions,
Safety Belts ............................................... 34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 37
Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 13
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display .......... 134
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 134
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 410
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 264
Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 184
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 103
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................. 104
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................ 366
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 363
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 340
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 436
General Motors ........................................ 436
United States Government ....................... 436
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 98
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 99
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 122
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 32
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 424
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 258
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 413
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 133
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 169
Pretensioners ............................................. 40
Reminder Light ........................................ 168
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 381
Center Passenger Position .................. 33, 34
Driver Position ........................................... 22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 22
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 21
449
Safety Belts (cont.)
Rear Outside Passenger Positions ............. 34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 37
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 40
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 400
Seats
Manual ........................................................ 9
Power Seat ................................................ 10
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 13
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10
Secondary Latch System ............................. 373
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Seat Position .................................. 66
Rear Outside Seat Position or the
Second Row Center Seat Position .......... 63
Right Front Seat Position .................... 68, 72
Security Light .............................................. 183
Service ........................................................ 286
Accessories and Modifications .................. 286
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 288
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 287
450
Service (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 287
Engine Soon Light ................................... 178
Publications Ordering Information ............. 437
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 96
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ..................................... 189
Radios without Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ..................................... 189
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 385
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 129
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 130
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 148
Sliding Side Door ........................................ 111
Spare Tire ................................................... 378
Installing .................................................. 366
Removing ................................................ 363
Storing ..................................................... 376
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 394
Speedometer ............................................... 168
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 235
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 177
StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ........................ 177
Starting Your Engine ................................... 122
Steering ...................................................... 239
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ..........................
Storage Areas .............................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...............
Sun Visors ..................................................
Swing-Out Side Door, 60/40 ........................
Swing-Out Windows ....................................
147
139
258
118
112
118
T
Taillamps .....................................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Passlock® ................................................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .....................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Different Size ...........................................
Dual Tire Operation ..................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
339
223
119
119
147
342
384
354
360
362
385
356
351
361
350
352
366
366
Tires (cont.)
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Secondary Latch System .........................
Spare Tire ................................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Tow/Haul Mode Light ...................................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
Traction
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transmission Operation, Automatic ..............
Trip Odometer .............................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
363
373
378
376
343
347
357
358
358
354
185
264
266
264
235
305
125
168
148
147
451
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 224
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 357
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 232
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 259
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................ 431
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 388
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 388
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 162
Visors .......................................................... 118
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 175
Warnings (cont.)
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 358
Different Size ........................................... 356
Replacement ............................................ 358
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 51
Windows ..................................................... 116
Manual ..................................................... 116
Power ...................................................... 117
Swing-Out Windows ................................. 118
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 151
Washer Fluid ........................................... 320
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 340
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 383
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 389
Wipers ..................................................... 150
Winter Driving ............................................. 254
W
Y
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 166
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 146
Other Warning Devices ............................ 146
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 398
452
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement